附件 - zhejiang university · web viewhal r. varian “intermediate microeconomics: a modern...
TRANSCRIPT
English-taught Courses for Undergraduates
School of Management
Zhejiang University
English-taught Courses for Undergraduate
Type Course Title Credit Hour Semester
FundamentalCourses
Intermediate Microeconomics 3 48Autumn-Winter
2013-2014
Social Psychology 3 48Autumn-Winter
2013-2014
MethodologicalCourses
Managerial Statistics 3 48Spring-Summer
2013-2014
Applied Operations Research 3 48Spring-Summer
2013-2014
Econometrics 3 48Spring-Summer
2013-2014
Functional Courses
Strategic Management 2 32Summer
2013-2014
Cross-cultural Management 2 32Spring
2013-2014
Human Resource Management 2 32Summer
2013-2014
Management Communication 2 32Spring
2013-2014
Intermediate Financial Accounting 2 32Autumn
2013-2014
Management Information Systems 2 32Winter
2013-2014
Intermediate MicroeconomicsCourse Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Intermediate Microeconomics
Intermediate Microeconomics (3 Credits)
Lecturers C Bram Casby amp Yang Xiaolan
Email yxlanzjueducn Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings To be decided
Prerequisites
Principles of Microeconomics Calculus
Course Materials Hal R Varian ldquoIntermediate Microeconomics A Modern Approach Seventh Edition W W Norton 2005Holt Charles A Markets Games amp Strategic Behavior2007
Course Objectives
Intermediate mircoeconomics is one of the core courses set up for undergraduates who have learned primary economics probability theory and higher mathematics The purpose of this course is to provide a solid theoretical foundation and research methods to help students being able to do scienfic research and investigation independently in the future
Course Description
The main aim of this course is to provide a further understanding of Microeconomics The course will cover the theory of consumer choice the theory of the firm and market power and market structure We will examine firm behaviour (firm pricing strategies such as entry deterrence and advertising) in these markets We will also look at factor markets and vertical integration asymmetric information contrcts and moral hazards This course will expose students to the new developments in the field of microeconomics which have now come to assume a central role such as game theory and the strategic interactions between firms
pricing with market power During this course students are guided to test those theories by experimental method
Tentative Course Outline
The course aims to cover most of the following topics
Chapter 1 Preface Application of microeconomic theory and its limitations Empirical analysis and normative analysis Why study microeconomics What is the market Actual price and nominal price
Chapter 2 Basic principals of supply and demand Market mechanism Changes in supply and demand Elasticity of supply and demand Elasticity of short-term and long-term Learn and predict the result of changing the market conditions Result of government interventionmdashmdashprice control
Chapter3 Consumer behavior Preferences for consumption Budget constraint Consumer choice Revealed preference The concept of utility Cost-of-living index
Chapter4 Individual need and market demand Individual need Income and substitution effects Market demand Consumer surplus Associated external effects Empirical estimate of demand
Chapter 5 Choice under uncertainty Risk description Preferences for risk Reduce risk Demand for risky assets
Chapter 6 Production Production technology Equal-product curve A variable input(labor) production Two variable inputs production Returns to scale
Chapter 7 Cost of production Cost measurewhat are the most important cost Short-term cost Long-term cost Cost curve of long-term and short-term The production of two productsmdashmdashEconomies of scope The dynamic change of costmdashmdashlearning curve Cost estimation and prediction
Chapter 8 Profit maximization and competitive supply Profit maximization Marginal revenue marginal cost and profit maximization Choose a short-term production Short-term supply curve of competitive producers Short-term supply curve of market Long-term yield choice Long-term supplay curve of industry Fully competitive market
Chapter 9 Competitive market analysis The profit and loss evaluation of government policiesmdashmdashconsumer surplus
and producer surplus Efficiency of competitive market Minimum price Price suppor and and production quotas Import quotas and tariff The impact of tax or subsidy
Chapter10 Market Power Monopoly and Monopsony Monopoly Monopoly Power Sources of Monopoly Power The Social Costs of Monopoly Power Monopsony Monopsony power Limiting Market Power The Antitrust Laws
Chapter11 Pricing with Market Power Capturing Consumer Surplus Price Discrimination Intertemporal Price Discrimination and Peak-load Pricing The Two-part Tariff Bundling Advertising
Chapter12 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Monopolistic Competition Oligopoly Price Competition Competition versus Collusion The Prisonersrsquo Dilemma Implication of the Prisonersrsquo Dilemma for Oligopolistic Pricing Cartels
Chapter13 Game Theory and Competitive Strategy Gaming and Strategic Decisions Dominant Strategies The Nash Equilibrium Revisited Repeated Games Sequential Games Threats Commitments and Credibility Entry Deterrence Bargaining Strategy
Chapter14 Markets with Asymmetric Information Quality Uncertainty and the Market For Lemons Market Signaling Moral Hazard The Principal-Agent Problem Managerial Incentives in an Integrated Firm Asymmetric Information in Labor Markets Efficiency Wage Theory
Chapter15 Externalities and Public Goods Externalities Ways of Correcting Market failure Externalities and Property Rights Common Property Resources Private Preferences for Public Goods
Schedule
Date Activities Lecturers organizer20111115-121 Microeconomics theories Yang Xiaolan 2011126-1229 Applying experimental
method in testing microeconomics theories
C Bram Cadsby Yang Xiaolan
201213-15 Group project amp students presentation
Yang Xiaolan
Teaching Methods Classroom experiment Group project
Student Learning Reading papers Making presentations
Outcome Expectation
1Understand the basic knowledg methods and principles of microeconomics
2Build simple microeconomics models according to actual research
3 Understand how to design conduct experimental research and analyze experimental data
Student Evaluation
1 Homework (20)2 Group project Presentation (30)3 Final (50)
Social Psychology
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
English-taught Courses for Undergraduate
Type Course Title Credit Hour Semester
FundamentalCourses
Intermediate Microeconomics 3 48Autumn-Winter
2013-2014
Social Psychology 3 48Autumn-Winter
2013-2014
MethodologicalCourses
Managerial Statistics 3 48Spring-Summer
2013-2014
Applied Operations Research 3 48Spring-Summer
2013-2014
Econometrics 3 48Spring-Summer
2013-2014
Functional Courses
Strategic Management 2 32Summer
2013-2014
Cross-cultural Management 2 32Spring
2013-2014
Human Resource Management 2 32Summer
2013-2014
Management Communication 2 32Spring
2013-2014
Intermediate Financial Accounting 2 32Autumn
2013-2014
Management Information Systems 2 32Winter
2013-2014
Intermediate MicroeconomicsCourse Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Intermediate Microeconomics
Intermediate Microeconomics (3 Credits)
Lecturers C Bram Casby amp Yang Xiaolan
Email yxlanzjueducn Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings To be decided
Prerequisites
Principles of Microeconomics Calculus
Course Materials Hal R Varian ldquoIntermediate Microeconomics A Modern Approach Seventh Edition W W Norton 2005Holt Charles A Markets Games amp Strategic Behavior2007
Course Objectives
Intermediate mircoeconomics is one of the core courses set up for undergraduates who have learned primary economics probability theory and higher mathematics The purpose of this course is to provide a solid theoretical foundation and research methods to help students being able to do scienfic research and investigation independently in the future
Course Description
The main aim of this course is to provide a further understanding of Microeconomics The course will cover the theory of consumer choice the theory of the firm and market power and market structure We will examine firm behaviour (firm pricing strategies such as entry deterrence and advertising) in these markets We will also look at factor markets and vertical integration asymmetric information contrcts and moral hazards This course will expose students to the new developments in the field of microeconomics which have now come to assume a central role such as game theory and the strategic interactions between firms
pricing with market power During this course students are guided to test those theories by experimental method
Tentative Course Outline
The course aims to cover most of the following topics
Chapter 1 Preface Application of microeconomic theory and its limitations Empirical analysis and normative analysis Why study microeconomics What is the market Actual price and nominal price
Chapter 2 Basic principals of supply and demand Market mechanism Changes in supply and demand Elasticity of supply and demand Elasticity of short-term and long-term Learn and predict the result of changing the market conditions Result of government interventionmdashmdashprice control
Chapter3 Consumer behavior Preferences for consumption Budget constraint Consumer choice Revealed preference The concept of utility Cost-of-living index
Chapter4 Individual need and market demand Individual need Income and substitution effects Market demand Consumer surplus Associated external effects Empirical estimate of demand
Chapter 5 Choice under uncertainty Risk description Preferences for risk Reduce risk Demand for risky assets
Chapter 6 Production Production technology Equal-product curve A variable input(labor) production Two variable inputs production Returns to scale
Chapter 7 Cost of production Cost measurewhat are the most important cost Short-term cost Long-term cost Cost curve of long-term and short-term The production of two productsmdashmdashEconomies of scope The dynamic change of costmdashmdashlearning curve Cost estimation and prediction
Chapter 8 Profit maximization and competitive supply Profit maximization Marginal revenue marginal cost and profit maximization Choose a short-term production Short-term supply curve of competitive producers Short-term supply curve of market Long-term yield choice Long-term supplay curve of industry Fully competitive market
Chapter 9 Competitive market analysis The profit and loss evaluation of government policiesmdashmdashconsumer surplus
and producer surplus Efficiency of competitive market Minimum price Price suppor and and production quotas Import quotas and tariff The impact of tax or subsidy
Chapter10 Market Power Monopoly and Monopsony Monopoly Monopoly Power Sources of Monopoly Power The Social Costs of Monopoly Power Monopsony Monopsony power Limiting Market Power The Antitrust Laws
Chapter11 Pricing with Market Power Capturing Consumer Surplus Price Discrimination Intertemporal Price Discrimination and Peak-load Pricing The Two-part Tariff Bundling Advertising
Chapter12 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Monopolistic Competition Oligopoly Price Competition Competition versus Collusion The Prisonersrsquo Dilemma Implication of the Prisonersrsquo Dilemma for Oligopolistic Pricing Cartels
Chapter13 Game Theory and Competitive Strategy Gaming and Strategic Decisions Dominant Strategies The Nash Equilibrium Revisited Repeated Games Sequential Games Threats Commitments and Credibility Entry Deterrence Bargaining Strategy
Chapter14 Markets with Asymmetric Information Quality Uncertainty and the Market For Lemons Market Signaling Moral Hazard The Principal-Agent Problem Managerial Incentives in an Integrated Firm Asymmetric Information in Labor Markets Efficiency Wage Theory
Chapter15 Externalities and Public Goods Externalities Ways of Correcting Market failure Externalities and Property Rights Common Property Resources Private Preferences for Public Goods
Schedule
Date Activities Lecturers organizer20111115-121 Microeconomics theories Yang Xiaolan 2011126-1229 Applying experimental
method in testing microeconomics theories
C Bram Cadsby Yang Xiaolan
201213-15 Group project amp students presentation
Yang Xiaolan
Teaching Methods Classroom experiment Group project
Student Learning Reading papers Making presentations
Outcome Expectation
1Understand the basic knowledg methods and principles of microeconomics
2Build simple microeconomics models according to actual research
3 Understand how to design conduct experimental research and analyze experimental data
Student Evaluation
1 Homework (20)2 Group project Presentation (30)3 Final (50)
Social Psychology
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Intermediate MicroeconomicsCourse Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Intermediate Microeconomics
Intermediate Microeconomics (3 Credits)
Lecturers C Bram Casby amp Yang Xiaolan
Email yxlanzjueducn Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings To be decided
Prerequisites
Principles of Microeconomics Calculus
Course Materials Hal R Varian ldquoIntermediate Microeconomics A Modern Approach Seventh Edition W W Norton 2005Holt Charles A Markets Games amp Strategic Behavior2007
Course Objectives
Intermediate mircoeconomics is one of the core courses set up for undergraduates who have learned primary economics probability theory and higher mathematics The purpose of this course is to provide a solid theoretical foundation and research methods to help students being able to do scienfic research and investigation independently in the future
Course Description
The main aim of this course is to provide a further understanding of Microeconomics The course will cover the theory of consumer choice the theory of the firm and market power and market structure We will examine firm behaviour (firm pricing strategies such as entry deterrence and advertising) in these markets We will also look at factor markets and vertical integration asymmetric information contrcts and moral hazards This course will expose students to the new developments in the field of microeconomics which have now come to assume a central role such as game theory and the strategic interactions between firms
pricing with market power During this course students are guided to test those theories by experimental method
Tentative Course Outline
The course aims to cover most of the following topics
Chapter 1 Preface Application of microeconomic theory and its limitations Empirical analysis and normative analysis Why study microeconomics What is the market Actual price and nominal price
Chapter 2 Basic principals of supply and demand Market mechanism Changes in supply and demand Elasticity of supply and demand Elasticity of short-term and long-term Learn and predict the result of changing the market conditions Result of government interventionmdashmdashprice control
Chapter3 Consumer behavior Preferences for consumption Budget constraint Consumer choice Revealed preference The concept of utility Cost-of-living index
Chapter4 Individual need and market demand Individual need Income and substitution effects Market demand Consumer surplus Associated external effects Empirical estimate of demand
Chapter 5 Choice under uncertainty Risk description Preferences for risk Reduce risk Demand for risky assets
Chapter 6 Production Production technology Equal-product curve A variable input(labor) production Two variable inputs production Returns to scale
Chapter 7 Cost of production Cost measurewhat are the most important cost Short-term cost Long-term cost Cost curve of long-term and short-term The production of two productsmdashmdashEconomies of scope The dynamic change of costmdashmdashlearning curve Cost estimation and prediction
Chapter 8 Profit maximization and competitive supply Profit maximization Marginal revenue marginal cost and profit maximization Choose a short-term production Short-term supply curve of competitive producers Short-term supply curve of market Long-term yield choice Long-term supplay curve of industry Fully competitive market
Chapter 9 Competitive market analysis The profit and loss evaluation of government policiesmdashmdashconsumer surplus
and producer surplus Efficiency of competitive market Minimum price Price suppor and and production quotas Import quotas and tariff The impact of tax or subsidy
Chapter10 Market Power Monopoly and Monopsony Monopoly Monopoly Power Sources of Monopoly Power The Social Costs of Monopoly Power Monopsony Monopsony power Limiting Market Power The Antitrust Laws
Chapter11 Pricing with Market Power Capturing Consumer Surplus Price Discrimination Intertemporal Price Discrimination and Peak-load Pricing The Two-part Tariff Bundling Advertising
Chapter12 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Monopolistic Competition Oligopoly Price Competition Competition versus Collusion The Prisonersrsquo Dilemma Implication of the Prisonersrsquo Dilemma for Oligopolistic Pricing Cartels
Chapter13 Game Theory and Competitive Strategy Gaming and Strategic Decisions Dominant Strategies The Nash Equilibrium Revisited Repeated Games Sequential Games Threats Commitments and Credibility Entry Deterrence Bargaining Strategy
Chapter14 Markets with Asymmetric Information Quality Uncertainty and the Market For Lemons Market Signaling Moral Hazard The Principal-Agent Problem Managerial Incentives in an Integrated Firm Asymmetric Information in Labor Markets Efficiency Wage Theory
Chapter15 Externalities and Public Goods Externalities Ways of Correcting Market failure Externalities and Property Rights Common Property Resources Private Preferences for Public Goods
Schedule
Date Activities Lecturers organizer20111115-121 Microeconomics theories Yang Xiaolan 2011126-1229 Applying experimental
method in testing microeconomics theories
C Bram Cadsby Yang Xiaolan
201213-15 Group project amp students presentation
Yang Xiaolan
Teaching Methods Classroom experiment Group project
Student Learning Reading papers Making presentations
Outcome Expectation
1Understand the basic knowledg methods and principles of microeconomics
2Build simple microeconomics models according to actual research
3 Understand how to design conduct experimental research and analyze experimental data
Student Evaluation
1 Homework (20)2 Group project Presentation (30)3 Final (50)
Social Psychology
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Intermediate Microeconomics
Intermediate Microeconomics (3 Credits)
Lecturers C Bram Casby amp Yang Xiaolan
Email yxlanzjueducn Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings To be decided
Prerequisites
Principles of Microeconomics Calculus
Course Materials Hal R Varian ldquoIntermediate Microeconomics A Modern Approach Seventh Edition W W Norton 2005Holt Charles A Markets Games amp Strategic Behavior2007
Course Objectives
Intermediate mircoeconomics is one of the core courses set up for undergraduates who have learned primary economics probability theory and higher mathematics The purpose of this course is to provide a solid theoretical foundation and research methods to help students being able to do scienfic research and investigation independently in the future
Course Description
The main aim of this course is to provide a further understanding of Microeconomics The course will cover the theory of consumer choice the theory of the firm and market power and market structure We will examine firm behaviour (firm pricing strategies such as entry deterrence and advertising) in these markets We will also look at factor markets and vertical integration asymmetric information contrcts and moral hazards This course will expose students to the new developments in the field of microeconomics which have now come to assume a central role such as game theory and the strategic interactions between firms
pricing with market power During this course students are guided to test those theories by experimental method
Tentative Course Outline
The course aims to cover most of the following topics
Chapter 1 Preface Application of microeconomic theory and its limitations Empirical analysis and normative analysis Why study microeconomics What is the market Actual price and nominal price
Chapter 2 Basic principals of supply and demand Market mechanism Changes in supply and demand Elasticity of supply and demand Elasticity of short-term and long-term Learn and predict the result of changing the market conditions Result of government interventionmdashmdashprice control
Chapter3 Consumer behavior Preferences for consumption Budget constraint Consumer choice Revealed preference The concept of utility Cost-of-living index
Chapter4 Individual need and market demand Individual need Income and substitution effects Market demand Consumer surplus Associated external effects Empirical estimate of demand
Chapter 5 Choice under uncertainty Risk description Preferences for risk Reduce risk Demand for risky assets
Chapter 6 Production Production technology Equal-product curve A variable input(labor) production Two variable inputs production Returns to scale
Chapter 7 Cost of production Cost measurewhat are the most important cost Short-term cost Long-term cost Cost curve of long-term and short-term The production of two productsmdashmdashEconomies of scope The dynamic change of costmdashmdashlearning curve Cost estimation and prediction
Chapter 8 Profit maximization and competitive supply Profit maximization Marginal revenue marginal cost and profit maximization Choose a short-term production Short-term supply curve of competitive producers Short-term supply curve of market Long-term yield choice Long-term supplay curve of industry Fully competitive market
Chapter 9 Competitive market analysis The profit and loss evaluation of government policiesmdashmdashconsumer surplus
and producer surplus Efficiency of competitive market Minimum price Price suppor and and production quotas Import quotas and tariff The impact of tax or subsidy
Chapter10 Market Power Monopoly and Monopsony Monopoly Monopoly Power Sources of Monopoly Power The Social Costs of Monopoly Power Monopsony Monopsony power Limiting Market Power The Antitrust Laws
Chapter11 Pricing with Market Power Capturing Consumer Surplus Price Discrimination Intertemporal Price Discrimination and Peak-load Pricing The Two-part Tariff Bundling Advertising
Chapter12 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Monopolistic Competition Oligopoly Price Competition Competition versus Collusion The Prisonersrsquo Dilemma Implication of the Prisonersrsquo Dilemma for Oligopolistic Pricing Cartels
Chapter13 Game Theory and Competitive Strategy Gaming and Strategic Decisions Dominant Strategies The Nash Equilibrium Revisited Repeated Games Sequential Games Threats Commitments and Credibility Entry Deterrence Bargaining Strategy
Chapter14 Markets with Asymmetric Information Quality Uncertainty and the Market For Lemons Market Signaling Moral Hazard The Principal-Agent Problem Managerial Incentives in an Integrated Firm Asymmetric Information in Labor Markets Efficiency Wage Theory
Chapter15 Externalities and Public Goods Externalities Ways of Correcting Market failure Externalities and Property Rights Common Property Resources Private Preferences for Public Goods
Schedule
Date Activities Lecturers organizer20111115-121 Microeconomics theories Yang Xiaolan 2011126-1229 Applying experimental
method in testing microeconomics theories
C Bram Cadsby Yang Xiaolan
201213-15 Group project amp students presentation
Yang Xiaolan
Teaching Methods Classroom experiment Group project
Student Learning Reading papers Making presentations
Outcome Expectation
1Understand the basic knowledg methods and principles of microeconomics
2Build simple microeconomics models according to actual research
3 Understand how to design conduct experimental research and analyze experimental data
Student Evaluation
1 Homework (20)2 Group project Presentation (30)3 Final (50)
Social Psychology
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
pricing with market power During this course students are guided to test those theories by experimental method
Tentative Course Outline
The course aims to cover most of the following topics
Chapter 1 Preface Application of microeconomic theory and its limitations Empirical analysis and normative analysis Why study microeconomics What is the market Actual price and nominal price
Chapter 2 Basic principals of supply and demand Market mechanism Changes in supply and demand Elasticity of supply and demand Elasticity of short-term and long-term Learn and predict the result of changing the market conditions Result of government interventionmdashmdashprice control
Chapter3 Consumer behavior Preferences for consumption Budget constraint Consumer choice Revealed preference The concept of utility Cost-of-living index
Chapter4 Individual need and market demand Individual need Income and substitution effects Market demand Consumer surplus Associated external effects Empirical estimate of demand
Chapter 5 Choice under uncertainty Risk description Preferences for risk Reduce risk Demand for risky assets
Chapter 6 Production Production technology Equal-product curve A variable input(labor) production Two variable inputs production Returns to scale
Chapter 7 Cost of production Cost measurewhat are the most important cost Short-term cost Long-term cost Cost curve of long-term and short-term The production of two productsmdashmdashEconomies of scope The dynamic change of costmdashmdashlearning curve Cost estimation and prediction
Chapter 8 Profit maximization and competitive supply Profit maximization Marginal revenue marginal cost and profit maximization Choose a short-term production Short-term supply curve of competitive producers Short-term supply curve of market Long-term yield choice Long-term supplay curve of industry Fully competitive market
Chapter 9 Competitive market analysis The profit and loss evaluation of government policiesmdashmdashconsumer surplus
and producer surplus Efficiency of competitive market Minimum price Price suppor and and production quotas Import quotas and tariff The impact of tax or subsidy
Chapter10 Market Power Monopoly and Monopsony Monopoly Monopoly Power Sources of Monopoly Power The Social Costs of Monopoly Power Monopsony Monopsony power Limiting Market Power The Antitrust Laws
Chapter11 Pricing with Market Power Capturing Consumer Surplus Price Discrimination Intertemporal Price Discrimination and Peak-load Pricing The Two-part Tariff Bundling Advertising
Chapter12 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Monopolistic Competition Oligopoly Price Competition Competition versus Collusion The Prisonersrsquo Dilemma Implication of the Prisonersrsquo Dilemma for Oligopolistic Pricing Cartels
Chapter13 Game Theory and Competitive Strategy Gaming and Strategic Decisions Dominant Strategies The Nash Equilibrium Revisited Repeated Games Sequential Games Threats Commitments and Credibility Entry Deterrence Bargaining Strategy
Chapter14 Markets with Asymmetric Information Quality Uncertainty and the Market For Lemons Market Signaling Moral Hazard The Principal-Agent Problem Managerial Incentives in an Integrated Firm Asymmetric Information in Labor Markets Efficiency Wage Theory
Chapter15 Externalities and Public Goods Externalities Ways of Correcting Market failure Externalities and Property Rights Common Property Resources Private Preferences for Public Goods
Schedule
Date Activities Lecturers organizer20111115-121 Microeconomics theories Yang Xiaolan 2011126-1229 Applying experimental
method in testing microeconomics theories
C Bram Cadsby Yang Xiaolan
201213-15 Group project amp students presentation
Yang Xiaolan
Teaching Methods Classroom experiment Group project
Student Learning Reading papers Making presentations
Outcome Expectation
1Understand the basic knowledg methods and principles of microeconomics
2Build simple microeconomics models according to actual research
3 Understand how to design conduct experimental research and analyze experimental data
Student Evaluation
1 Homework (20)2 Group project Presentation (30)3 Final (50)
Social Psychology
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Chapter 6 Production Production technology Equal-product curve A variable input(labor) production Two variable inputs production Returns to scale
Chapter 7 Cost of production Cost measurewhat are the most important cost Short-term cost Long-term cost Cost curve of long-term and short-term The production of two productsmdashmdashEconomies of scope The dynamic change of costmdashmdashlearning curve Cost estimation and prediction
Chapter 8 Profit maximization and competitive supply Profit maximization Marginal revenue marginal cost and profit maximization Choose a short-term production Short-term supply curve of competitive producers Short-term supply curve of market Long-term yield choice Long-term supplay curve of industry Fully competitive market
Chapter 9 Competitive market analysis The profit and loss evaluation of government policiesmdashmdashconsumer surplus
and producer surplus Efficiency of competitive market Minimum price Price suppor and and production quotas Import quotas and tariff The impact of tax or subsidy
Chapter10 Market Power Monopoly and Monopsony Monopoly Monopoly Power Sources of Monopoly Power The Social Costs of Monopoly Power Monopsony Monopsony power Limiting Market Power The Antitrust Laws
Chapter11 Pricing with Market Power Capturing Consumer Surplus Price Discrimination Intertemporal Price Discrimination and Peak-load Pricing The Two-part Tariff Bundling Advertising
Chapter12 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Monopolistic Competition Oligopoly Price Competition Competition versus Collusion The Prisonersrsquo Dilemma Implication of the Prisonersrsquo Dilemma for Oligopolistic Pricing Cartels
Chapter13 Game Theory and Competitive Strategy Gaming and Strategic Decisions Dominant Strategies The Nash Equilibrium Revisited Repeated Games Sequential Games Threats Commitments and Credibility Entry Deterrence Bargaining Strategy
Chapter14 Markets with Asymmetric Information Quality Uncertainty and the Market For Lemons Market Signaling Moral Hazard The Principal-Agent Problem Managerial Incentives in an Integrated Firm Asymmetric Information in Labor Markets Efficiency Wage Theory
Chapter15 Externalities and Public Goods Externalities Ways of Correcting Market failure Externalities and Property Rights Common Property Resources Private Preferences for Public Goods
Schedule
Date Activities Lecturers organizer20111115-121 Microeconomics theories Yang Xiaolan 2011126-1229 Applying experimental
method in testing microeconomics theories
C Bram Cadsby Yang Xiaolan
201213-15 Group project amp students presentation
Yang Xiaolan
Teaching Methods Classroom experiment Group project
Student Learning Reading papers Making presentations
Outcome Expectation
1Understand the basic knowledg methods and principles of microeconomics
2Build simple microeconomics models according to actual research
3 Understand how to design conduct experimental research and analyze experimental data
Student Evaluation
1 Homework (20)2 Group project Presentation (30)3 Final (50)
Social Psychology
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Chapter11 Pricing with Market Power Capturing Consumer Surplus Price Discrimination Intertemporal Price Discrimination and Peak-load Pricing The Two-part Tariff Bundling Advertising
Chapter12 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Monopolistic Competition Oligopoly Price Competition Competition versus Collusion The Prisonersrsquo Dilemma Implication of the Prisonersrsquo Dilemma for Oligopolistic Pricing Cartels
Chapter13 Game Theory and Competitive Strategy Gaming and Strategic Decisions Dominant Strategies The Nash Equilibrium Revisited Repeated Games Sequential Games Threats Commitments and Credibility Entry Deterrence Bargaining Strategy
Chapter14 Markets with Asymmetric Information Quality Uncertainty and the Market For Lemons Market Signaling Moral Hazard The Principal-Agent Problem Managerial Incentives in an Integrated Firm Asymmetric Information in Labor Markets Efficiency Wage Theory
Chapter15 Externalities and Public Goods Externalities Ways of Correcting Market failure Externalities and Property Rights Common Property Resources Private Preferences for Public Goods
Schedule
Date Activities Lecturers organizer20111115-121 Microeconomics theories Yang Xiaolan 2011126-1229 Applying experimental
method in testing microeconomics theories
C Bram Cadsby Yang Xiaolan
201213-15 Group project amp students presentation
Yang Xiaolan
Teaching Methods Classroom experiment Group project
Student Learning Reading papers Making presentations
Outcome Expectation
1Understand the basic knowledg methods and principles of microeconomics
2Build simple microeconomics models according to actual research
3 Understand how to design conduct experimental research and analyze experimental data
Student Evaluation
1 Homework (20)2 Group project Presentation (30)3 Final (50)
Social Psychology
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Schedule
Date Activities Lecturers organizer20111115-121 Microeconomics theories Yang Xiaolan 2011126-1229 Applying experimental
method in testing microeconomics theories
C Bram Cadsby Yang Xiaolan
201213-15 Group project amp students presentation
Yang Xiaolan
Teaching Methods Classroom experiment Group project
Student Learning Reading papers Making presentations
Outcome Expectation
1Understand the basic knowledg methods and principles of microeconomics
2Build simple microeconomics models according to actual research
3 Understand how to design conduct experimental research and analyze experimental data
Student Evaluation
1 Homework (20)2 Group project Presentation (30)3 Final (50)
Social Psychology
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Social Psychology
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Social Psychology
Social Psychology (3 Credits)
Lecturers Joumlrg Metelmann E-mail joergmetelmannunisgch
Zhongyuan ZHANG and Fan ZHOUE-mail zhangzhongyuangmailcomOffice hours 1500-1700 Thursday
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Hewstone M Stroebe W and Jonas K (eds) (2008) Introduction to Social Psychologoly A European Perspective (4th ed) Malden BPS Blackwell
Myers D (2005) Social Psychology (8th ed) McGraw-Hills (optional)
Course Objectives
This course has the following objectives
1 It aims to introduce comprehensively the discipline of social psychology
including its major research topics classic theories commonly applied research
methods and the disciplinersquos general position within social sciences by so doing
the course aims to prepare undergraduates of management majors with
fundamental knowledge that would be required in more specified areas such as
organizational behaviour
2 It aims to cultivate fundamental skills for logical thinking as well as academic
analyses and debates in social psychology
3 It aims to demonstrate the intrigue of theories how theories can be applied to
understand and explain the social world that we all live in and on top of that to
enable us to be critical
4 It aims finally to initiate in students an interest in English writing English
speaking and more importantly English thinking The course also prepare for
students who aim to further their educations abroad western lecturing and learning
methods
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Course Description
In this introductory course students will come across major theories and research
topics of social psychology following a logical and holistic framework Theories are
not presented in isolation but in mutual relations and values debates assumptions
and practical implications pertaining to theories are expounded whenever these are
involved The latest edition of a renowned textbook (Hewstone et al 2008) of social
psychology is recommended for the course Students are encouraged to relate what
they have learnt from textbooks to their everyday life experiences and to further
explore different fields of social psychology as their interest develop Students
attending the course are not required to have preliminary knowledge in social
psychology but they are required to cover chapters of the textbook before they come
to lectures The course is taught and evaluated entirely in English and students are
required to be proficient in English listening speaking and writing This course is a
prerequisite for students interested in organizational theories organizational
behaviour and human resource management
Tentative Course Outline
Session one introducing social psychology
No reading is required before the session
Students will be divided into groups and each group will be allocated a presentation
topic during the session
Session two research methods in social psychology
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 2
No group presentation during this session
Session three social perception and attribution
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 3
No group presentation during this session
Session four social cognition
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 4
No group presentation during this session
Session five self and social identity
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 5
Presentation 1 on social perception and attribution
Session six attitudes content structure and functions
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 6
Presentation 2 on social cognition
Session seven strategies of attitude and behaviour change
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 7
Presentation 3 on self and social identity
Session eight aggression
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 8
Presentation 4 on attitudes
Session nine prosocial behaviour
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 9
Presentation 5 on self and attitude and behavioural change
Session ten affiliation attraction and close relationships
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 10
Presentation 6 on aggression
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Session eleven social influence
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 11
Presentation 7 on prosocial behaviours
Session twleve the pscyhology of group
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 12
Presentation 8 on affiliation attraction and close relationships
Session thirteen group performance and leadership
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 13
Presentation 9 on social influence
Session fourteen prejudice and intergroup relations
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 14
Presentation 10 on group behaviour
Session fifteen social psychology in action
Required reading before the session Hewstone et al 2008 ch 15
Presentation 11 on group performance and leadership
Session sixteen questions and answers
Teaching Methods
Lecturing is the main method of teaching To increase learning interest video and
imagery documents will be used in lectures along with slides Students attending the
course will be divided into groups of four Each group is required to make one
presentation during the course and that presentation will be taking into consideration
in the final scoring Each session of lecture contains a fifteen-minute group
discussion Studentsrsquo participation in those discussions too will account for certain
percentage in the course score
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Student Learning
Students learn through reading literature attending lectures participating in group
presentations and class discussions and last but not lease preparing for the final
examination
Outcome Expectation
It is expected that students will acquire a general understanding of the discipline of
social psychology after attending the course They will also have their (initial)
experiences and gains in methods of learning that whether or not they intend to be
academia in the future would be useful logical reasoning academic debating and
English thinking
Student Evaluation
Attendance 30
Presentation 15
Class discussion 5
Final exam 50
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Managerial Statistics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Managerial Statistics
Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits )
Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose and Dr Xi ChenE-mail chen_xizjueducnOffice hours Monday 1000-1100 am
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials 1 Teaching notes developed by lecturers 2D Anderson D Sweeney and T Williams Statistics Business and Economics 9th
Edition China Machine Press (机械工业出版社) 2009(原著第 10版有中译本)
3 Business Statistics by D Levine T Krehbiel and M Berenson 4th ed Pearson Education
Course Objectives
By this courses the students will learn1 Basic concepts in probability and statistics2 The principle of fact based decision making3 Necessary skills for business data analysis based on statistics4 Manipulating softwares for statistical analysis such as Excel and SPSS
Cour se Description
This course introduces students to basic concepts in probability and statistics of relevance to managerial decision making Topics include basic data analysis random variables and probability distributions sampling distributions interval estimation hypothesis testing and regression Numerous examples will be chosen from business applications
Tentative Course Outline
Lecture 1 General introduction to statistics1 Population Sample2 Descriptive statistics Inferential statistics
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Lecture 2 Probability distribution and Normal distribution 1 The normal distribution2 The standardized normal distribution3 Evaluating the normality assumption4 The exponential distribution
Lecture 3 Sampling and sample distribution 1 Introduction to sampling distribution2 Sampling distribution of the mean3 Sampling distribution of proportion
Lecture 4 Confidence interval estimation and tests of hypothesis (about 70 min)1 Estimation process2 Point estimates3 Interval estimates4 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( known)5 Determining sample size6 Confidence interval estimation for the mean ( unknown)7 Confidence interval estimation for proportion8 Hypothesis testing methodology9 Z test for the mean ( known)10 P-value approach to hypothesis testing11 Connection to confidence interval estimation12 One-tail tests13 T test for the mean ( unknown)14 Z test for the proportion
Lecture 5 Two sample tests and analysis of variance (about 55 min)1 Comparing two independent samples
a) Independent samples Z test for the difference in two meansb) Pooled variance t test for the difference in two means
2 F test for the difference in two variances3 The completely randomized design one-factor analysis of variance
a) ANOVA assumptionsb) F test for difference in c means
Lecture 6 Regression (about 70 min)1 Types of regression models2 Determining the simple linear regression equation3 Measures of variation4 Assumptions of regression and correlation5 Residual analysis 6 Measuring autocorrelation7 Inferences about the slope
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
8 Correlation - measuring the strength of the association9 Estimation of mean values and prediction of individual values10 Multiple regression
Lecture 7 Time series analysis (about 55 min)1 What is time series analysis2 Components of time series3 Different trend models4 Model selection5 Auto regression
Lecture 8 A brief introduction to data mining (about 60 min)
1 What is data mining2 Popular data mining techniques3 Popular data mining software4 Examples
Teaching MethodsThis course will be conducted in multiple formats1 Teaching based on lecturersrsquo notes2 Experiments on software such as SPSS and Excel3 After class assignments and in-class assignments
Student LearningStudents can learn from the lectures teaching notes textbook They are also advised to do exercises using SPSS and Excel to get observable experience with statistics analysis
Outcome ExpectationThe students are expected to be able to perform basic statistical analysis using SPSS and Excel after the attendance of this course They are also expected to form the basic idea of fact based decision making
Student Evaluation
The students will be evaluated based on multiple criteria
Class participants 10
After class assignment 20
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
In-class assignment 10
Final exam 60
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Applied Operations Research
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Applied Operations Research Applied Operations Research ( 3 Credits ) Lecturers Dr Indranil Bose Associate Professor amp
Dr Weihua Zhou Associate Professor
Office Room 1005-5Phone 8820 6827Email bosebusinesshkuhk larryzhougmailcom
Office hours Monday 130am-230pm
Class Meetings To be decided
Course Materials
Spreadsheet Modeling and Decision Analysis 5th Edition Author Cliff T Ragsdale Thomson Learning Inc
Course Objectives
This course will help you to develop skills in formulating analyzing and solving decision-making problems It will provide background for conducting research or pursuing career in related areas
Course Description
This is an introductory course in operations research You will be introduced to a
number of management science techniques that you may need to use at various stages
of your career in the industry sometimes even in your own personal life As a student
of business you will learn to develop appropriate models for different business
scenarios to get answers from these models using various techniques to analyze and
interpret the results and to use the information to make better business decisions
Materials covered in the course also will be used in upper-level courses in finance
marketing management economics operations management and computer
information systems Topics will include breakeven analysis optimization decision
analysis and queuing theory
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Course Coverage
Basic Decision Tools
bull Breakeven Analysis
bull Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel
Optimization Topics
bull Linear Programming (LP) Model Formulation
bull Solving LP Models Graphically
bull Solving LP Models Using Excel
bull LP Sensitivity Analysis
Probability-based Topics
bull Decision Analysis
bull Queuing
Course Assessment
Homeworks (20)
Class participation (20)
Exam (60)
General Advice
Your success in this course largely depends on your consistent effort Even you are
very intelligent you need to practice to develop your quantitative skill Only reading
will not be sufficient This course puts lot of emphasis on defining and solving
problems skills that most students find challenging to master Hence it will require a
change in study habits In particular you cannot wait until the last minute to begin
preparing for a test The following guidelines are provided to help you to make your
experience in this course easier and more worthwhile and to enhance the chances of
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
obtaining a better grade
bull Attend the class regularly Take notes comprehensively and follow along the class
exercises actively Browse through the assigned readings before the class and read
them thoroughly just after the topics have been covered in the class along with your
class notes Dont get frustrated if you do not understand everything on the first try
This is normal when working with quantitative material In fact since our class meets
for a short duration you will most likely not understand everything we cover in each
class session so you will need to take comprehensive notes in class do the assigned
readings and attempt the practice problems to clarify your understanding and identify
your questions
bull The only way to develop your quantitative skills is to solve problems on your own
You may feel that you understand the material after watching me work on examples
in the class but that is not the case Unless you work on enough number of practice
problems soon you will realize during the tests and quizzes that you are not able to
perform well and running out of time
bull Donrsquot wait till the last moment Start working on both the practice problems and
graded homework assignments well in advance This habit will give you time to think
carefully about what you are doing validate your work and seek help as needed
bull Donrsquot memorize to solve problems but understand the concepts involved
Memorizing how to do certain problems will not be sufficient as you will need to
develop your quantitative skills to analyze various business situations and apply the
concepts to solve problems in the future
bull Get together with fellow students and form study groups The opportunity to discuss
the material and go over the practice problems with other students facilitates learning
the concepts However remember that you are required to work individually on
graded homework assignments If you are interested in joining a study group and need
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
help finding one please let me know
bull If you do not understand any thing donrsquot be shy to ask questions Remember no
question is a dumb question Also utilize the office hours for further clarifications you
may need When you come to my office bring your notes and related practice
problems with you Please e-mail any file you would like to show me prior to coming
to the office Try to identify specific questions that occurred when you were reading
or working on problems While I cannot repeat lectures in my office or work on your
homework for you I will make every effort to help you understanding the material
Detailed course scheduleYou should browse the assigned sections of your text BEFORE class and then read
them carefully after class Note The schedule will be updated and modified as
necessary with the progress made in class
Lesson 1 Topics Overview of Management Science Introduction to Modeling Breakeven Analysis Sensitivity Analysis Using Excel Reading Chapter 1 (Sections 10-13 15-18)
Lesson 2 Topics Introduction to Linear Programming (LP) Models LP Model Formulations Solving LP Models GraphicallySpecial Conditions in LP ModelsReading Chapter 2 (Sections 20-210)
Lesson 3 Topics LP Models LP Models for Make vs Buy Decisions LP Models for BlendingSolving LP Models Using the Excel Solver Reading Chapter 3 (Section 30-38 311)
Lesson 4Topics LP Models
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
LP Models for Simple Investment DecisionsLP Models for Multi-period Cash Flow Financial PlanningReading Chapter 3 (Section 39 313)
Lesson 5 Topics LP Models LP Models for Multi-period Production and Inventory PlanningLP Models for Network Problems (Transportation and Transshipment)Reading Chapter 3 (Section 310 312) and Chapter 5 (Sections 50-51 and 54)
Lesson 6Topics LP Sensitivity AnalysisReading Chapter 4 (Sections 40-45)
Lesson 7Topics Introduction to Decision AnalysisProbabilistic Methods of Decision MakingDecision TreeMulti-Stage Decision ProblemsUsing Sample Information in Decision MakingValue of Perfect Information in Decision MakingReading Chapter 15 (Sections 150-154 1571 158 159 1510-1513)
Lesson 8Topics Introduction to Queuing TheoryExponential and Poisson Distributions Kendall NotationBasic Single Server Queuing ModelMulti Server Queuing ModelQueuing Models with Non-Exponential Service Times Queue with Finite BufferReading Chapter 13 (Sections 130-136 137 139-1310 1312)
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Econometrics
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Econometrics
Econometrics (3 Credits)Lecturers Henry Kinnucan
E-mail kinnuhwauburneduMobile +1 (334) 844-5614
Chunhui YeOffice 9th floor School of Management Zhejiang UniversityPhone 13777459158+1 646-912-8820Email chhyezjueducn
Class Meetings To be decided
Office hours Wednesday 1100 AM - 1200 PM or by appointment
Course Materials Introductory Econometrics A Modern Approach 4th EditionAuthor Jeffrey M WooldridgePublisher South-WesternCopyright 2009ISBN-10 0-324-58162-9ISBN-13 978-0-324-58162-1Pages 912 hardcover
Software The course involves a considerable amount of computing and students must learn and use a sophisticated statistical software package STATA is highly recommended and is the only package that will be supported by the instructor and TArsquos
Students should purchase Intercooled Stata 100 available online atwwwstatacomordernewedugradplanscgpcampus-orderhtml
Prerequisites Principles of microeconomics principles of macroeconomics and introductory probability and statistics
Course Objectives
The course provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to the practice of
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
econometrics It deals with applications of statistical methods to the testing and estimation of economic relationships The main topics covered include review of probability and statistical inference the linear regression model extensions of the basic linear regression model and problems that arise when analyzing cross section and time series data by means of regression models We will use statistical and econometric software to analyze real world data
Course Description
This is an introductory course in applied econometrics The primary objective is to provide students with a solid theoretical and practical foundation for the interpretation of empirical evidence in economics As such there is a dual focus on econometric theory and ldquohands-onrdquo experience working with economic data The course focuses on the multiple regression model Statistical assumptions theory and results are carefully developed as are the necessary conditions for the valid application of regression analysis to economic data Students will complete a short written empirical project (term paper) that provides experience in the use of econometric methods as well as the interpretation of regression results
Tentative Course Outline
1 Review of Mathematical Tools Probability Distributions and Statistical InferenceBasic Mathematical ToolsProbability DistributionsPoint and Interval EstimationProperties of EstimatorsHypothesis Testing and Confidence Intervals
Wooldridge Appendices A B and C
2 Nature of Econometrics and Economic Data21 What is Econometrics22 Economic Data
Wooldridge Chapter 1
3 The Two-Variable Linear Regression Model31 Definition of the Simple Regression Model32 Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) Estimation33 Inference
Wooldridge Chapters 2
4 Multiple Linear Regression
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
41 Specification of the Model42 OLS Estimation43 InferenceWooldridge Chapters 3-4
5 Further Issues in Multiple Regression51 Functional Forms and Other Specification Issues
Wooldridge Chapters 652 Qualitative Information and Dummy Variables
521 Dummy Independent Variables522 A Binary Dummy Dependent Variable The Linear Probability Model523 Policy Analysis and Program Evaluation
Wooldridge Chapter 753 Heteroskedasticity
531 Nature and Consequences of Heteroskedasticity532 Testing for Heteroskedasticity533 Weighted (Generalized) Least Squares
Wooldridge Chapter 8
6 Regression Analysis With Time Series Data61 Nature of Time Series Data62 Models with Lags63 Trends and Seasonality64 Serial Correlation
Wooldridge Chapterssections 101-105 121-125
7 Other Topics in Regression71 Binary Dummy Dependent Variable Logit and Probit Models72 Instrumental Variables Estimation and Two Stage Least Squares
Wooldridge ChapterSection 171 151-155
8 Carrying out an Empirical Project and Writing an Empirical PaperWooldridge Chapter 19
Teaching MethodsClassroom teaching and computer lab
Student LearningAt the end of this course students will be able to1 manipulate describe and apply the matrix algebra probability statistical
inference and optimization methods commonly used in graduate-level quantitative methods courses
2 interpret and explain the statistical and mathematical programming tools used in
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
applied economics journal articles3 create and manipulate computer programs that solve statistics and optimization
problems commonly encountered in applied economics
Student Evaluation
The final grade is based on the following
Task Weight Due dateMid-Term Exam 20 May 302011
Term Paper 40 June 15 2011Final Exam 40 Final Exam Period
Term Paper In order to develop skills in using econometric methods interpreting and discussing empirical evidence in economics students must complete a short term paper Details will be announced later in the semester (probably in May) but the basic
idea is that students will be provided data and assigned a question based on those data (eg similar to the textbook computer problems)
Students will have no choice over the topic but will be randomly assigned one of several possible topics
The papers are expected to be six pages in length (double spaced) plus tables
A note about plagiarism Plagiarism is a very serious problem There will be more details concerning the definition of plagiarism advice on how to avoid it and the associated penalties when we discuss the paper assignment in more detail
Email Policy
The course works best when there is interaction between faculty and students To this end I have scheduled one hour per week of office hours In addition the TA will be available for one hour per week Combined students thus have two hours per week for one-on-one discussion with me or the TA concerning course materialsWhere does email fit in My experience is that email is not the appropriate forum for discussing details of econometrics or interpretation of regression output ndash that is why we have set aside office hours That said email can be helpful on occasion and within limitsAccordingly I will endeavour to reply to email within 24 hours except on weekends with the following provisions
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
The question should require a one (or two) sentence response (maximum) If it takes more office hours are the more appropriate venue
I will never answer questions concerning STATA (or computing more generally) Such questions should be directed towards the STATA TA
I will never answer emails that request information that can be found on the website or the syllabus
I will not reply to emails concerning grading For such matters office hours are more appropriate
It is also (strongly) preferable that you use a ldquozjurdquo email address My spam filter is set to maximum Moreover university policy stipulates a preference for these email addresses
Always identify yourself in your email Please do not send attachments of any kind Please do not submit term work by emailI should note however that I encourage you to provide course feedback and comments via email if you wish
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Strategic Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Strategic Management
Strategic management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Stephen AW Drew E-mail StephenDrewcomcastnet
Jiang WeiE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hours Monday Tuesday Friday and others More than
30 hours per week
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course Materials
Textbooks
Robert M Grant (2010) Contemporary Strategy Analysis 7th ed Wiley
Jiang Wei Strategic Management Zhejiang University Press 200
HBS Cases
Ice-Fili
Airborne Express
Amazoncommdash2002 Samsung Electronics
Walt Disney Co The Entertainment King
ZARA Fast Fashion Nucleon Inc
HBR amp Other Articles
Mintzberg H Ahlstrand B and Lampel J Strategy Safari A Guided Tour
Through the Wilds of Strategic Management 1998 (中文版魏江译机械
工业出版社2007)
Porter ME 1996 What is strategy Harvard Business Review 74(6) 61-amp
Wernerfelt B 1984 A Resource-Based View of the Firm Strategic
Management Journal 5 171-180
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Prahalad CK Hamel G 1990 The Core Competence of the Corporation
Harvard Business Review 68(3) 79-91
Grant RM 1996 Toward a knowledge-based theory of the firm Strategic
Management Journal 17 109-122
Course Objectives
To develop a basic understanding and overview of historical and current
concepts and theory in the field of strategic management
To develop the abilities to summarize integrate evaluate and extend theory in
strategic management
To be able to apply theory to the practice of strategic management
To develop process skills that will lead to success in the undergraduate
program and during his or her career These skills emphasize the abilities to
think clearly and quickly and to communicate effectively and efficiently both
orally and in writing
Course Description
This is a core strategic management course that surveys the most influential and
classic works in strategy area The course will also cover economics sociology and
psychology views of strategic management providing a basic understanding of
strategy theories The course should be approached as an opportunity to gain
exposure to the entire field
Tentative Course Outline
1 Course Orientation What is strategy Why do we need strategic thinking
Ch 1 The Concept of Strategy
Ch 2 Goals Values and Performance
2 How do industry environments influence firm competitive advantage
Ch 3 Industry Analysis The Fundamentals
Ch 4 Industry Evolution and Strategic Change
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
3 Where does competitive advantage come from
Ch 5 Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis
Ch 6 The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage
4 Business Model and Sustainability (1)
Ch 7 Cost advantage differentiation advantage and focus advantage
5 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 8 Analyzing and developing resources and capabilities
6 Competence and Growth through Diversification
Ch 9 Diversification Strategy
7 Vertical Integration and Competitiveness
Ch 10 Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm
8 Global Strategy
Ch 11 Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation
9 Organization and Strategy Implementation
Ch 12 Organization Structure and Management Systems
Ch 13 Implementing Corporate Strategy Managing the Multibusiness Corporation
Teaching Methods
Teacherrsquos lectures In this course there are 32 hours class hours in which 16
hours are used to teacherrsquos lectures on the basic understanding theories and
practices on the field of strategic management
Cases analysis Totally four cases are selected from the Chinese firms And
the students are needed to prepare for team discussion PPT slides making
presentation In the class the arguments and comments from students are
necessary and required
Teamrsquos presentation and class discussion Five articles will be assigned to
every team and they will prepare for reading understanding and discussing
then every team have to make a presentation on the main theory discussion
and conclusion of the articles The students are expected to provide the
responses to discussion questions and comments
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Teacherrsquos comments Teacherrsquos comments are the most important in the
course in Chinese background so the insightful comments are needed in every
case presentation or article discussion
Student Learning
Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are
unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles
assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all groups are required to prepare a
presentation by PPT that summarizes their preparation for each session This
presentation should contain two components for each topic (1) A summary of
important ideas concepts theories models methods results and conclusions
for each reading Summary should be devoted to each reading Keeping notes
on articles that you read is an excellent habit to establish that will save you
time and energy in the future (2) An evaluative statement of the literature
This statement should address key strengths (contributions) as well as
weaknesses in the readings for the week and the comments of the theory
should be given
Students are often asked to share their ideas from their presentations during
class Presentations should be brought to each class On any given week
presentations may be collected so be sure to keep up and bring your journals
to class
All students are required to prepare a proposal that relates a topic(s) covered in
class to their own research interests This proposal may be a valuable start on
the studentrsquos research project it may identify a general area of interest or it
may eliminate a topic from the studentrsquos potential set of interests
Outcome Expectation
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
In this course the students should learn the knowledge and thinkings on the six
facets
Integrating the management knowledge by strategic management framework
Integrating the functional strategies into the comprehensive consideration
Integrating the internal amp external environments and resources to design the
strategic planning
Focusing on the long-term perspectives of the firmsrsquo development
Designing the core competency and sustained competitive advantages
Cognizing and experimenting strategies by integrating with the employeersquos
behaviors
Student Evaluation
Class Participation (10 of grade)
Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade)
Term assignment of proposal for one selected firm (30 of grade)
Final examination (30 of grade)
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Cross-Cultural Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management Zhejiang University
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Cross-Cultural Management Cross-Cultural Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturer Susan Carol SCHNEIDERSusanSchneiderunigech
Gangfeng ZHANGgangfengzhangzjueducn
Office hours Monday amp Wendesday 13 30mdash16 00
Class Meetings ( preferred )
Monday 0950-1125Wendesday 0950-1125
Or Wendesday 0950-1125Friday 0950-1125
Course Prerequisites Before taking this course the students are expected to have already taken folowing courses Introduction to Management Marketing Organizational Behaviour Human Resource Management
Course Materials
Textbook
Susan C Schneider amp Jean-Louis Barsoux Managing Across Cultures second edition London PearsonFinancial Times 2003
Materials for further reading or partially being used in class
1 Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work- Related Values Beverly Hills CA Sage (Also Second Edition 2007
Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press影印版)
2 Fred Luthans Richard M Hodgestts and Jonathan P Doh (2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management (Sixth Edition) Posts amp Telecom
Press (邮电出版社影印版) ndash McGrawHill
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
3 陈晓萍2005 《跨文化管理》Beijing清华大学出版社4 Anne Marie Francesco amp Barry Allen Gold (2003) International
Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill Tsinghua University Press ndash Pearson Prentice Hall
5 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press
6 Trompennaars F Riding the wave of Culture Understanding cultural diversity
in business London Nicholas Brealey 1993 (中文翻译版 华夏出版社2003)
7 Chen Min Asian Management System Chinese Japanese and Korean Styles of Business London Routledge 1995
8 Sebenius James K ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002
9 Elenkov Detelin S(1998) ldquoCan American Management Concepts work in Russiardquo Califonia Management Review 404
10 John L Graham amp N Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003
11 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
12 William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
13 Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006
14 Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22
15 Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30
Cases
16 Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
17 Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School
18 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case
Course Objectives
This course aims at providing basic knowledge as well as insights about cultural differences and its impact on management and business operations The students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour
b) Understand how culture influences peoplersquos consumption behaviour and buying habits
c) Understand the differences in organizational structure strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences so that to help them to
d) Work or conduct business with people from difference cultural backgrounds
Course Description
Cultural differences are often the roots of conflicts and failure of international communication and management Culture casts influences on the way of communication and interaction the consumer behaviours and buying habits as well as day-to-day management This course provides an overview of cross-cultural issues that one may face while heshe interacts or conducts business with people from other nations The course will put a special emphasis on the differences between Chinese culture and the cultures of other countries so that to facilitate the sino-foreign interaction and business operation
Although the course will provide some dos and donrsquots about certain cultures but it intends more to equip the students with theoretical frameworks and analytical skills so that they can use them in analysing the complicated real cases happen to them and working together with people from different cultural background
Other than class lectures video and photographical materials will be used to illustrate the cultural characteristics and its impacts on peoplersquos behaviours
Tentative Course Outline
Topic 1 Culture and its Expression
What is culture and how culture influences peoplersquos behaviors
Taught together by Zhang Gangfeng and Susan C Schneider
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Film show Murder on Oriental Express (part about 30 min)
Reading Chapter 1 and 2 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures and Chapter 1 of Fred Luthans etal
Topic 2 Interpreting Pattern of Culture
Theoretical frameworks that scholars tried to analyze and compare the cultures qualitatively and quantitatively
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Readings Chapter 3 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Hofstede Geert 1980 Culturersquos Consequences International Differences in Work-Related Values 2nd Edition 2007 Shanghai Shanghai Foreign Language Education Press--Sage) Triandis H C 1995 Individualism and Collectivism Boulder CO Westview Press Triandis H C XP Chen K-S Chan 1998 lsquoScenarios for the measurement of collectivism and Individualismrsquo Journal of Cross-Culture Psychology 29 (2) 275-289)
Topic 3 Cross Culture Communication and Negotiation
How peoples of different cultures communicate and negotiate in different ways And how this may impact in management and business operation
Taught together by ZHANG Gangfeng ZHANG Zhongyuan and ZHOU Fan
Film show Lost in Transition(Part about 30 min) Cenci in Cina(Part about 15 min)
Reading Chapter 4 in Fred Luthans etal Sebenius James K (2002) ldquoThe hidden challenge of cross-border negotiationsrdquo Harvard Business review March 2002 John Graham amp Mark Lam lsquoThe Chinese negotiationrsquo Harvard Business review Oct 2003 Ron S Fortgang David A Lax amp James K Sebenius ldquoNegotiating the Spirit of the Dealrdquo Harvard Business review Feb 2003
Topic 4 Cross Cultural Marketing
What are the differences of consumer behaviors and buying habits How to deal with these differences in marketing strategy
Taught by ZHANG Gangfeng and ZHANG Zhongyuan
Reading Fuaad A Qureshi and Mathew M Millett (1999) lsquoIntroduction to Islamic Financersquo Harvard Business School William McEwen et al ldquoInside the mind of Chinese consumerrdquo Harvard Business review March 2006
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Topic 5 Culture and Organization
How does culture influence organization structure and process
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 4 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 6 Culture and Strategy
The cultural root of strategy faced with similar business environments how do managers from different cultures perceive and respond to that environment
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 5 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures
Topic 7 Culture and Human Resource Management
The cultural meaning of human resource management How does culture influence the selection acculturalization training performance appraisal compensation and rewards career development And how motivation and leadership differ across Cultures
Taught by Susan C Schneider
Reading Chapter 6 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Chapters 6 and 9 of A M Francesco amp B A Gold International Organizational Behavior Test Readings Cases and Skill
Topic 8 Managing in an International Context
Recognizing the culture differences and building cross-cultural competencies in managing these cultural differences in business operation
Taught together by Susan C Schneider and ZHANG Gangfeng
Reading Chapter 7 8 amp 9 of Schneider Susan C and Jean-Louis Barsoux 1997 Managing Across Cultures Brett Jeanne Kristin Behfar and Mary C Kern ldquoManaging Multinational Teamsrdquo Harvard Business Review November 2006) Chapters 2 of Fred Luthans et al(2008) Cross-Cultural Communication and Management Howard N and Y Teramoto 1981 ldquoThe Really Important Difference between Japanese and Western Managementrdquo Management International Review 3 19-30 Stewart C Edward amp Milton J Bennett 1991 American Cultural Patterns A Cross-Cultural Perspective Maine Intercultural Press Drucker Peter F 1971 ldquoWhat we can Learn from Japanese Managementrdquo Harvard Business Review 49 110-22 Jinxuan Zhang amp Steward Hamilton ldquoDanone amp Wahaha A bitter-Sweet
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Partnershiprdquo IMD Case Lu Jiangyong Et al (2008) lsquoDanone v Wahaha Who is having the last laughrsquo The University of Hong Kong
Teaching Methods
The course will be delivered with the combination of
In-class lectures watching video materials
Individual and group assignment
Student presentation and discussion
Student Learning
Class attendance is obliged for the students participating in the course
Active learning prepare in advance and actively participate in class discussion and sharing own experience and learning with other classmates
Learn from practice complete individual and team assignments
Outcome Expectation
After study this course students are expected to
a) Understand the cultural differences between nations and how these differences influence peoplersquos behaviour and buying habits dos and donrsquots
b) Understand the differences in organizational structure employee relation strategic formation and execution way of communication leadership motivation management style and system and so on between different nations which are brought by the cultural differences
c) Form a kind of sensibility to the cultural differences between nations and regions and its impact on management and business operation
Student Evaluation
Studentsrsquo performances will be evaluated as follows
Final exam 60
Class participation and contribution 20
Case report and presentation 20
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Human Resource Management
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Management ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Fang Lee Cooke E-mail fangcookemonashedu
Office hours 13 30-16 30(MondayTuesdayWednesday) Shimei YanE-mail shimeiyanzjueducn Office hours 13 30- 16 30(MondayTuesdayFriday)
Class Meetings205pm ndash 340pm MondayTuesdayApril 20th ndash June 20th 2012
Course Materials
TextbooksMain Textbook Raymond A Noe John R Hollenbeck Barry Gerhart Patrick M Wright(2006) Human Resource Management(Fifth Edition) China Renmin University Press RMB3500 yuanReference Textbook George Bohlander Scott Snell Managing Human Resources(Thirteen Edition)(2003) Dongbei University of Finance amp Economics Press ISBN 7-81084-314-1 Renminbi7600 yuanArticles amp CasesArticles and cases will be provided before the class sessions for reading and preparationSupplementary materials will be distributed by teaching assistant in class
Course Objectives
The objective of the course is to introduce and outline the core areas of human resource management and core models of human resource management and create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology By studying and applying knowledge and tools in the HRM field students should
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
develop capabilities towards human resource management programs and human resources development
Course Description
In this course we will focuses on the different human resource practices from the perspective of strategic human resource management The main point is competency Based on competency model the course will analyze the human resource management environment recruitment and selection training and career development motivation and compensation performance appraisal systems and performance development and international human resource management During the teaching cases will be used and shared and hot issues such as ldquoa bundle of human resource practicesrdquo and ldquohigh performance human resource management systemrdquo will be discussed
Course Outline
This course includes 8 topics (one topic every week) Topic 1-Topic7 Professor Fang Lee Cooke will give the lectures Topic8 Dr Shimei Yan will teach it Teaching assistant Dr Shimei Yan Dr Xuejun Chen
Topic 1 Human resource management environment It includes challenge of human resources management Strategic human resource management (Chapter1 and Chapter2 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest D(1997) Human resource management and performance a review and research agenda International Journal of Human Resource Management 8(3) 263-276
Winstanley D and Woodall J(2000) The ethical dimension of human resource management Human Resource Management Journal 10(2) 5-20
Topic 2 Job analysis and job design It includes competency theory job analysis model and methods job design approach (Chapter 3 in main textbook)
Reading list
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Holman D(2002) Employee well being in call centres Human Resource Management Journal 12(4) 35-50
Griffin R W(1991) Effects of work redesign on employee perceptions attitudes and behaviours a long-term investigation Academy of Management Journal 34(2) 425-435
Topic 3 Human resource acquisition It includes human resource planning human
resource recruitment human resource selection methods (Chapter4 and Chapter5
in main textbook)Reading list
Phillips J (1998) Effects of realistic job previews on multiple organizational outcomes a meta analysis Academy of Management Journal 41(6) 673-690
Robertson I and Smith M (2001) Personnel selection Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 74(4) 441-472
Topic 4 Training and development It includes training strategy and training method socialization and orientation career development (Chapterr6 and Chapter8 in main textbook)
Reading list Lloyd C (2002) Training and development deficiencies in the ldquohigh skillrdquo sector Human Resource Management Journal 12(2) 64-81
Topic 5 Motivation and compensation It includes motivation theory and strategy pay structure decision recognizing employee contributions with pay (Chapter10 and Chapter11 in main textbook)
Reading listMarsden D and Richardson D (1994) Performing for pay The effects of lsquomerit payrdquo on motivation in a public service British Journal of Industrial Relations 32(2) 243-261
Topic 6 Performance management It includes performance model performance indicators performance appraisal system performance feedback (Chapter 7 in main textbook)
Reading list Guest et al (2003) Human resource management and corporate
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
performance in the UK British Journal of Industrial Relations 41(2) 291-314
Becker B and Gerhart B (1996) The impact of human resource management on organizational performance progress and prospects Academy of Management Journal 39 779-801
Topic 7 International human resource management It includes cross-culture issue in organization human resource management in international organization (will distribute the relevant reading materials)
Reading list Taylor S Beechler S and Napier N (1996) Toward an integrative model of strategic international human resource management The Academy of Management Review 21(4) 959-985
Topic 8 Hot issues for human resource management It includes a bundle of human resource practice high performance human resource management system best
human resource practice (will provide the relevant reading paper)Reading list
Combs J Liu Y Hall A amp Ketchen D (2006) How much do high performance practice matter A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational performance Personnel Psychology 59 501-528
Boselie P Dietz G amp Boon C (2005) Strategic human resource management where have we come from where should we be going Human Resource Management Journal 15(3) 67-94
Teaching MethodsA great emphasis is placed on the interaction between theoretical and practical aspects of human resource management and development On the one hand the tutorial arrangement for paper discussion follows the lectures on the other hand the case teaching method is used to sharpen analytical skills and team problem-solving abilities Experiences and learning skill will be shared and developed through reading presentation classroom discussion case projects
Student LearningAttendance at classes and timely arrival for classes are necessary Students are expected to participate in the class activities and make contribution such as participation in group project and problem-solving preparation for discussions of
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
reading paper and cases giving report presentations They are important elements of the overall evaluation for both quality and quantity
Outcome ExpectationThrough the lectures and case teaching and paper reading the students are expected to get knowledge of human resource management framework and to outline the core areas of human resource management and to grasp the core models of human resource management and to create awareness about the human resource management principles and methodology At last during the process of the course teaching the students are also expected to have much more interests in HRM
Student Evaluation
Final grades will be evaluated as follows
Final exam (open questions and open books) 40Class participation and contribution 30Case and academic paper report and presentation 30
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Management Communication
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Management Communication
Management Communication ( 2 Credits )
Lecturers Dr YUE Tina XU Email tinayuexugooglemailcom
Dr Wei JiangE-mail weijiangzjueducnOffice hoursMonday Tuesday Friday and others
Class Meetings According to the class schedules
Course MaterialsTextbooks
Management Communication Principles and Practice McGraw-HillIrwin 机械工业出版社 ISBN9787111249139 2008年 9月
Course ObjectivesConsistent with the dual objectives of the FY Program FY MC is designed
To build your knowledge of the issues and best practices involved in todays essential and compelling management communication challenges and
To boost your personal oral written and visual communication skills by providing opportunities to practice familiar and new techniques in a variety of assignments
Course DescriptionFirst Year Management Communication (MC) aims to prepare you for leadership as a manager This course views communication from managerial organizational and corporate points of view preparing you to rise to the challenges posed to the manager as communicatorThroughout the year MC broadens your knowledge of contemporary communication while offering opportunities to develop your skills and abilities Because you will play many roles as you motivate and lead numerous stakeholders we will teach you to analyze and understand audiences Whether you will play the
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
leader liaison interpreter disseminator advocate or spokesperson MC will help you to understand important factors to consider when communicating in a given role Since you will spend up to 90 of your day communicating in a wide variety of situations using an everincreasing number of methods and channels we will encourage you to develop a broad yet flexible repertoire of communication skills Information explosion and globalization will press you to respond decisively and quickly so MC will help you to craft messages capable of overcoming boundaries presented by time space and culture Since as a manager you will represent the organization in whatever you do MC will help you understand the issues related to communicating in and as an organization With an understanding of these demands and their effects you will be better equipped to develop and apply your skills effectivelyTo focus our work MC takes a strategic approach We encourage you to pay attention to both processes and goals As a result you will develop improved judgment that will raise the probability that in any given situation your skills will achieve the response you want
Tentative Course OutlineModule I Introduction to Strategic CommunicationThe Semester foregrounds managerial communication meaning the topics and skills related to communicating as an individual manager in an organization while touching on some aspects of organizational and corporate communication Module I introduce you to a model for communicating strategically that you should internalize during the year This module also introduces other year-long themes such as the importance of credibility methods for influencing others making wise channel choices and dealing with the effects of technology Questions addressed includemiddot How can I craft and convey messages that are most likely to get the response I wantmiddot How does a manager establish and maintain credibilitymiddot What roles does storytelling play in business and how can I use it to my advantagemiddot How do I explain succinctly the purpose of a businessmiddot How can I narrow the gap between what I intend to say and how an audience receives itmiddot How is the way I manage people reflected in the way I manage wordsmiddot What should I consider when communicating across boundaries created by language culture and technology
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
middot How can I help a peer improve his or her communicationAssignments include an oral presentation and short written assignments Students also meet in conferences with instructors to review performance
Module II Persuasion and ArgumentTo accomplish their goals managers need to motivate convince and move others to implement change quickly Often managers act as advocates selling new ideas designed to improve organizational performance For example most high-performing managers scan their business environment alert to controversial issues that have important consequences for their organizations and their own careers To stay ahead astute managers thoughtfully develop a position on such issues and persuade others to join them To that end Module II explores persuasion and argument and addresses questions such asmiddot How can I use persuasion to promote change in an organizationmiddot What process of research and listening do I need to follow to develop my point of viewmiddot What are the elements of persuasion and how do I balance them to convince an audiencemiddot How can I construct arguments that will anticipate questions and diffuse resistance to my ideasmiddot What are the best ways to make my point visuallymiddot How do I keep my cool when answering tough questionsmiddot Why do I need to adjust my approach when selling my point in writing
The assignment for Module II is to persuade an audience to adopt your position on a contemporary business issue first in a presentation then in writing
Module III Communication ManagementModule III reverses terms from MC to CM or communication management Not only do managers need to learn how to communicate effectively as an individual (MC) but they also need to understand how to effectively manage communication within an organization and as an organization (CM) Communication management includes organizational and corporate communication perspectives Simply put organizational communication focuses on how messages move around in organizations while corporate communication focuses on the organization as communicator with multiple audiences Further Module III introduces you to the formal function area of Corporate Communication while encouraging you as an
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
individual to incorporate principles of corporate communication in your own managerial practice regardless of whatever field you choose Increasing your knowledge of communication management will enable you to operate more effectively as an agent in and a spokesperson for your organization
Module III addresses these questionsmiddot Why is corporate reputation so importantmiddot How can organizations use dialogue as an effective method of influence and knowledge sharingmiddot What if organizational communication could be managed like cash flow or inventorymiddot How does an organization communicate its identity and influence its imagemiddot What is the relationship between business strategy and corporate communicationmiddot What are the special issues associated with communicating with different constituencies such as emp loyees investors the media and opposition groupsmiddot How can an organization unify its messages and align stakeholder interests during and after a crisis
On days featuring a case various opportunities are available to try out new communication skills including impromptu speaking role-playing meetings and reporting-out on small group work On occasion guest speakers may join us to share their expertise
Module IV Communicating as a GroupModule IV marries Module III topics with the practical conc erns of preparing a group consulting-style presentation on organizational or corporate communication Several classes will be devoted to in-class workshops in which groups will meet together to work on their projects and learn skills such as project management storyboarding communicating with one voice and choreographing a group-delivered presentation The group presentation assignment serves as a finale to the FY Program requiring you to synthesize MC and FY learnings and preparing you for group project work typically done during summer internships and the SY MBA Program Module IV classes ask middot What communication challenges can I expect in group project managementmiddot How can we manage our group process in a way that will lead to an excellentproductmiddot What resources and interests do we have to work withmiddot Who should do what and how will we make decisions
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
middot How can we manage our deadline and synthesize our work into a wholemiddot What technologies might help us do our work efficientlymiddot What is our central message and how can we deliver the presentation with one voicemiddot Why do our recommendations make the best sense for this case
The spring semester concludes with group presentations followed by an individual written assignment on organizational or corporate communication
Teaching MethodsCases and readings will provide the basis for classroom discussion MC cases are intended to raise important issues while readings offer relevant background theory and practical information In addition to case discussions many days feature in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments Consequently MC meets in groups of 30 students in a workshop-like setting
Student Learning Each participant is required to come to class Since class discussion is an
integral part of the course absences and lack of preparedness are unacceptable All students are required to read all chapters and articles assigned on the syllabus
In addition to the assigned reading all students are required to participate in in-class oral written and visual communication exercises and assignments
Outcome ExpectationCommunication for a LifetimeFY MC offers opportunities for future managers to establish a foundation of knowledge about important management communication issues At the same time your learning will surely go beyond this course Communication is a performing art akin to mastering a sport or a musical instrument or management itself As a performing art communicating well can be pursued over a lifetime yet has no clear end point At first you learn the fundamentals and put lessons into practice You then start to increase your repertoire of skills and keep up with developments in your field Over time you will know more about the art and yourself understanding both with greater complexity and depth Periodically you might go back to basics to ldquokeep on top of your gamerdquo or to ldquostay in tunerdquo As you increase your mastery you may question what you think you know and identify new questions to ask You may mentor others in their communication With experience and the wisdom and
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
confidence that come with it you may even develop a personal philosophy that will guide your practice The MC faculty recognized that each student has unique personal needs Wherever you are on your path of learning about communication we look forward to working with you to help you achieve your goals Please do not hesitate to contact one of us to discuss your needs and ask questions
Student Evaluation Class Participation (10 of grade) Presentations of case analysis and literature readings (30 of grade) Term assignment of proposal for one selected firmr (30 of grade) Final examination (30 of grade)
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Intermediate Financial Accounting(I)
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Intermediate Financial Accounting (I)
Summer 2012(May 20mdashJuly 7)Course Intermediate Financial Accounting (I) (2 Credits)
Instructors Dr NAN ZHOU Email nzhoubinghamtonedu
Dr Hongling Han Email hhlzjueducn
Office hours By appointment
Class Meetings
By appointment
Course Materials
Required Text1048707 Kieso Weygandt and Warfield ldquoIntermediate Accountingrdquo 14th edition John Wiley amp Sons 2012 Required online resources1048707 Notes and class discussion problems1048707 Assignments1048707 Solutions to supplementary problems1048707 Practice exams and solutionsThe above materials will be available on WebCT
Course Objectives
This course builds upon Introduction to Financial Accounting and covers
principles concepts and assumptions that underlie contemporary accounting practices
in much greater details In particular it emphasizes on asset accounts and its sequel
Intermediate Financial Accounting (II) focuses on liability and ownersrsquo equity
accounts The objective is to help students develop a solid understanding of financial
accounting standards the ability to apply these rules to properly measure companiesrsquo
financial situations and the reasoning skill necessary to deal with emerging
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
accounting issues
For each topic covered in the course we first describe the underlying business
transactions and go through the technical details of Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) After doing this we then see how these transactions are reported
in the financial statements Aside from learning the accounting rules we will also
discuss why management analysts and investors care about accounting information
In addition we will spend time talking about managementrsquos incentives and how their
incentives can influence the decisions and estimates they make when reporting their
financial results
There are two key goals in this course The first goal is to learn how the numbers
reported in the financial statements are produced This requires you to learn the details
of accounting The second goal is to learn how to interpret the numbers being reported
in the financial statements This requires you to be able to back out the journal
entries that management made to report the numbers in the financial statements After
doing this you will be better equipped to address whether there are any distortions in
the financial statements and if so how to remove these distortions
Course Description
To give you some perspective of how this course fits into the Accounting Course
sequence the classes can be described as follows Introductory Accounting teaches
you the basic accounting for each of the items on the balance sheet and income
statement Intermediate Accounting expands your knowledge so that you can
understand the footnotes to the financial statements It also focuses on actual
financial statements and helps you learn the latitude management has in producing
the numbers reported in the financial statements The third course in the accounting
sequence is Financial Statement Analysis where you use your understanding of the
financial statements and the footnotes along with other information (plus what you
have learned in financecorporate strategymarketing) to compare and value firms
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Tentative Course Outline
On the following pages is the tentative course outline I may revise the outline as the
course progresses If I do change this outline I will notify the class both through
CTools and during class
Week Date Class Assigned Materials Topic1 1 Ch 1 Introduction and Review
2 Ch 2 Conceptual Framework 2 3 Ch 3 Accounting Process
4 Ch 4 Income Statement3 5 Ch 5 Balance Sheet
6Ch 6 NPV Calculations
4 7Ch 7 Cash and Receivables
8Midterm Exam
5 9 Ch 8 Inventories10 Ch 9 More on Inventories
6 11 Ch 10 Property Plant and Equipment12 Ch 11 Depreciation
7 13 Ch 11 Depreciation14 Ch 12 Intangible Assets
8 15 Ch 13 Current Liabilities16 Ch 13 Current Liabilities
Final Exam
Teaching Methods
The best way to learn is through numerous examples Therefore we will solve many
interesting examples and short problems in class and review financial disclosures
Your questions are welcome at any time We will ask questions and get your input
during class and on occasion I will ldquocold callrdquo We would like you to interact in the
class This helps me understand where you are having difficulty following the
material and it also makes the class more interesting for everyone I do not allocate
any portion of the grade to class participation but the more engaged and active you are
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
in the course the better your understanding and performance will likely be
Student Learning
It is important that you keep up with the material in this class We strongly
recommend that you read the assigned materials before coming to class After class
go through the lecture notes and see what has been emphasized and reread the
assigned material if you did not understand something Do the assigned online
problem sets and as many additional problems as you have time to do We cannot
overemphasize how much practicing problems will help you in this course
Outcome Expectation
You are expected to come to class prepared Assignments are to be read prior to the
class period for which they are assigned Assigned homework is to be completed
prior to the class period for which it is due You are expected to attend every class
arrive on time and remain the entire period
(1) Homework Every student is required to complete weekly homework sets to be
announced in class Based on your effort you may receive full credit partial credit
or zero credit for these assignments Late homework sets will not be accepted
Instead each student is allowed to miss two homework sets You may want to use
your two excuses wisely and reserve them for special occasions or emergencies
(2) Computer Assignments Every student will be required to do certain Excel
problems to be arranged
Student Evaluation
Class Participation 5Assignments 10Case Analyses 15Mid-term Examination 30Final Examination 40Total 100
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Grades
90 and more A80 ndash 89 B70 ndash 79 C60 ndash 69 D59 and less F
Each student is required to obtain at least 50 on the final exam and an average of at
least 50 overall to pass the course
Academic Misconduct Any case involving academic misconduct will be processed
according to the School of Management and Zhejiang University policies
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Management Information Systems
Course Syllabus
School of Management
Zhejiang University
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Management Information SystemsManagement Information Systems (2 Credits)
P rerequisite course s None
Target students2nd or 3rd year students of the School of Management
Lecturers Dr Daniel TOMIUKE-mail tomiukdanieluqamca Office hours TBA
Dr Wen Guang QUE-mail quwgzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Dr Qiuzhen WANGE-mail wqzzjueducnOffice hours TBA
Class MeetingsTBA
Course Materials 1 Book Management Information Systems Managing the Digital Firm 9th Edition
by Kenneth C Laudon and Jane P Laudon Prentice Hall 20062 Course Pack
Course Objectives
In this course the student will (1) understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of managers and organizations (2) understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies (3) be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases (4) integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Course Description
The course provides an overview of Information Systems as an essential tool for
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
conducting business in an increasingly global economy The course will introduce the field of Information Systems and the conceptual foundations underlying the design control and operation of computer-based systems used by business Students will learn to use spreadsheet and database application for solving different types of business problems
Tentative Course Outline
Class Contents
1 Introduction (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Overview of the syllabus Information technology in business Required knowledge of IS (information systems) for managers and
administrators
2 Hardware (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Types of information systems micro midrange central computers Peripherals (input output storage)
3 Software (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
Application software (eg spreadsheets word processing) Basic software (eg operating systems) Other business software (eg introduction to Enterprise Resource
Planning ndash ERP) Electronic identification of products
4 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to spreadsheets Formulas and functions in Excel Relative absolute mixed addressing
5 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Difficulties and problems associated with the usage of spreadsheets Development methodology for spreadsheets (planning influence
diagrams implementation) Modeling data using influence diagrams
6 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Organising your spreadsheet into zones and itrsquos advantages Documentation and parameter naming
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
Excel functions VLookup and HLookup
7 Decision Support with Spreadsheets (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Going from influence diagrams to the spreadsheet Excel functions IF and nested IF statements Business analyses tools in Excel
8 Midterm Exam (Dr Tomiuk andDr Qu)
9 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 1) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Introduction to data management principals Production and enterprise databases examples Performance measurement systems (ie dashboards) Relational databases Tables primary keys candidate keys foreign keys referential
integrity etc Normalising relational databases Entity relationship diagrams
10 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 2) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Development methodology of relational databases- Entity relationship diagrams (continued)- Transforming entity relationship diagrams into relational
schema (in-class examples and exercises)
11 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 3) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Queries types and examples Forms and reports
12 Fundamentals of Databases (Part 4) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Creating queries in QBE (in-class exercises and examples) Selection queries
Review and additional exercises Converting entity relationship diagram into relational schema
13 Telecommunications and Electronic Networks (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Telecommunications and networking in organisational environments Transmission media coaxial cable fibre optics wireless etc Data transmission Bandwidth the TCPIP protocol Types of networks based on Geographic dispersion network
topology
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
The notion of ClientServer The Internet and itrsquos advantages for organisations
14 Network Applications and E-commerce (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
Voice over IP (VOIP) Skype Web technologies and languages (html Java etc) Criteria for evaluating Web sites (contents functionalities
performance etc) Blogs Types of e-commerce sites (B2B B2C C2C) with examples Possibilities difficulties and the management of e-businesse
15 Security and Control of Information Systems (IS) (Lecturers Dr Tomiuk)
IS Vulnerabilities Security and control mechanisms Managing security and control Security and control tools and techniques Possibilities difficulties and the management issues in the security
and control of information systems
16 Final Exam (Dr Tomiuk Qu and Wang)
Teaching MethodsThis course consists of two parts (1) A theoretical and conceptual component covered in class which will be supported by lectures and (2) a practical (hands-on) component consisting of having students attend labs Evaluations will touch on materials covered in both of these components
Student LearningThe theoretical and conceptual parts of the course will consist in acquiring the vocabulary and the concepts relative to new information and communication technologies the modeling of information for decision support in management the conceptualization of databases in management The practical component consists of learning Excel and Access software In particular we shall examine how Excel is used in business decision making and how to exploit relational databases in business contexts This component of the course will be supported by lab sessions
Outcome Expectationbull Understand the importance of technology in treating information for the needs of
managers and organizations
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-
bull Understand the basic vocabulary and concepts relative to new information and communication technologies
bull Be able to use software to support management activities notably decision making and exploiting databases
bull Integrate the personal computer in hisher daily activities and future professional activities in management
Student Evaluation
Type Weight Week
Midterm exam 25 Week 8
TP 1 (Excel) 20 Available Week 4
Due date Week 8
TP 2 (Access) 20 Available Week 9
Due date Week 14
Final Exam 35 Week 16
- Social Psychology (3 Credits)
- Managerial Statistics ( 3 Credits)
- Applied Operations Research (3 Credits)
- Strategic management (2 Credits)
- Textbooks
- HBS Cases
- HBR amp Other Articles
-
- Cross-Cultural Management (2 Credits)
- Human Resource Management (2 Credits)
- Management Communication (2 Credits)
-
- Textbooks
-
- Ch 6
- NPV Calculations
- Ch 7
- Cash and Receivables
- Midterm Exam
-
- Management Information Systems (2 Credits)
-